1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1481–1520 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×50 Cold Storage Building

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×50 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $93,750

12

100×50 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$106,850$93,750SAVE $13,100
or $1953/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×50Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×50 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×50 as.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×50·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$93,750$106,850Save $13,100
or as low as $1953/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×50
100×50
this size
$93,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 5,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Ready
  • Framed Dock Openings
  • Heavy Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X50-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×50 cold storage building.

100 feet wide × 50 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 50′ · 5,000 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×50 cold storage building packs 5000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Produce packers, meat processors, and beverage distributors use the 100×50 as a refrigerated shell with insulated metal panels. 4,5000 sq ft holds roughly 200 standard pallets at 34-38°F. Framed openings pre-installed for dock levelers on the short wall.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Building works well at 100×50, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×50 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
5,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×50 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length50′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space5,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
5,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×50 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

5,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$1953/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×50 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $1953/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×50?

5,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 50′ footprint with 5,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $40,000–$60,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×50 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×50 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×50 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×50 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×51×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$22,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×50

Commercial Warehouse

100×50 commercial warehouse configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Warehouse →

🌾 100×50

Equipment & Hay Barn

100×50 equipment & hay barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Barn →

🏡 100×50

Barndominium

100×50 barndominium configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Barndominium →

🏭 100×50

Fabrication Shop

100×50 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🌾 100×50

Horse Riding Arena

100×50 horse riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Riding Arena →

🏢 100×50

Auto Body & Repair Shop

100×50 auto body & repair shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Auto Body & Repair Shop →

🎯 100×50

RV & Boat Storage

100×50 rv & boat storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Storage →

🏢 100×50

Self-Storage Facility

100×50 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,350Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏛️ 100×50

Church & Event Hall

100×50 church & event hall configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$93,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Church & Event Hall →

🌾 100×50

Livestock Barn

100×50 livestock barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$92,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Livestock Barn →

🎯 100×50

Indoor Sports Facility

100×50 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$91,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×50 cold storage building cost?

A 100×50 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $93,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $1953/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×50 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×50 cold storage building?

Almost always for 5,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×50 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×50 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×50 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $1953/month on a 100×50 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×50 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×50 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×50 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×50 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel building warehouse interior with forklift moving pallets beside tall metal racking

100×50 Cold Storage Building

5,000 sq ft for commercial warehouse, hay barn, or fabrication shop

100′ x 50′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×50 steel building delivers 5,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$93,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×80 Distribution Center

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Distribution Center | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Distribution Center
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Distribution Center

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Distribution Center, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside. Pallet racking runs.

You’re viewing:Distribution Center·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Red Iron
  • Vertical Roof
  • 4x 14×14 Dock Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-DISTRIBUTION-CENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 distribution center.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Distribution Center layout.

Logistics operators pick the 100×80 as a regional distribution center because the clear span fits four 100×80 roll-up dock doors along the 100-ft wall, with turning radius for 53-ft trailers inside. Pallet racking runs four deep down the long axis with a 12-ft cross aisle to spare.

💡 Pro tip:Distribution Center works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Distribution Center in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Distribution Center.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Distribution Center spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Distribution Center.

DAILY USEEveryday distribution center
Everyday distribution center
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a distribution center.
STORAGE OVERFLOWdistribution center + seasonal storage
distribution center + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Distribution Center, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 distribution center is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Distribution Center shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Distribution Center buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Distribution Center

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Distribution Center · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Distribution Center also viewed:

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Distribution Center questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 distribution center cost?

A 100×80 distribution center from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 distribution center price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud distribution center ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 distribution center?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud distribution center different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 distribution center need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 distribution center delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 distribution center without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 distribution center.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 distribution center?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 distribution center in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 distribution center meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Distribution Center quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal building distribution center with box truck unloading at the steel dock bays

100×80 Distribution Center

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building distribution facility at sunset with semi trailers docked and pallets staged

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Warehouse Steel Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. At 9,8000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on.

You’re viewing:Warehouse Steel Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 1,400 Pallet Positions
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-WAREHOUSE-STEEL-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 warehouse steel building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Warehouse Steel Building layout.

Built for industrial buyers managing equipment and inventory, this 100×80 warehouse steel building packs 8000 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. At 9,8000 sq ft you fit roughly 1,400 standard pallet positions on selective racking with room for a small office build-out. Insulated panels keep humidity-sensitive stock stable year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Warehouse Steel Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Warehouse Steel Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Warehouse Steel Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Warehouse Steel Building.

DAILY USEEveryday warehouse steel building
Everyday warehouse steel building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a warehouse steel building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWwarehouse steel building + seasonal storage
warehouse steel building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 warehouse steel building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Warehouse Steel Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Warehouse Steel Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Warehouse Steel Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Warehouse Steel Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 warehouse steel building cost?

A 100×80 warehouse steel building from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 warehouse steel building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud warehouse steel building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 warehouse steel building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud warehouse steel building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 warehouse steel building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 warehouse steel building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 warehouse steel building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 warehouse steel building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 warehouse steel building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 warehouse steel building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 warehouse steel building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 warehouse steel building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Warehouse Steel Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building distribution facility at sunset with semi trailers docked and pallets staged

100×80 Warehouse Steel Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×80 Manufacturing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Manufacturing Facility | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Manufacturing Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Manufacturing Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Manufacturing Facility, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around. 20-ft eaves clear overhead bridge cranes up.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Facility·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • Crane-Ready Framing
  • 26 GA Panels
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-MANUFACTURING-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 manufacturing facility.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Facility layout.

Manufacturers configure the 100×80 PEMB for a full production line including CNC cells, finishing bays, and QC stations, with no interior column to re-route conveyors around. 20-ft eaves clear overhead bridge cranes up to 5 tons when you order reinforced columns from the start.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Facility works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Manufacturing Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing facility
Everyday manufacturing facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing facility + seasonal storage
manufacturing facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Manufacturing Facility, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 manufacturing facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Manufacturing Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Manufacturing Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 manufacturing facility cost?

A 100×80 manufacturing facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 manufacturing facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 manufacturing facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 manufacturing facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 manufacturing facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 manufacturing facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 manufacturing facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 manufacturing facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 manufacturing facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 manufacturing facility handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 manufacturing facility ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Welder working inside a steel building fabrication shop with overhead crane and racks

100×80 Manufacturing Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×80 Commercial Workshop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Commercial Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Commercial Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Commercial Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Commercial Workshop, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other. Four walk-in doors, three 100×80 roll-ups, and a row of 100×80.

You’re viewing:Commercial Workshop·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 6-Bay Layout
  • 3x Roll-Ups
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-COMMERCIAL-WORKSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 commercial workshop.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Commercial Workshop layout.

Fabricators and auto-body shops spec the 100×80 commercial workshop to house six 100×80 bays along one wall with a shared 40-ft paint booth on the other. Four walk-in doors, three 100×80 roll-ups, and a row of 100×80 windows feed natural light to every station.

💡 Pro tip:Commercial Workshop works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Commercial Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Commercial Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Commercial Workshop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Commercial Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday commercial workshop
Everyday commercial workshop
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a commercial workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcommercial workshop + seasonal storage
commercial workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Commercial Workshop, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 commercial workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Commercial Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Commercial Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Commercial Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Commercial Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Commercial Workshop also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Commercial Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 commercial workshop cost?

A 100×80 commercial workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 commercial workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud commercial workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 commercial workshop?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud commercial workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 commercial workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 commercial workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 commercial workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 commercial workshop.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 commercial workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 commercial workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 commercial workshop meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Commercial Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Brown metal workshop with white roll-up door and skylights set among mountain pines

100×80 Commercial Workshop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×80 Aircraft Hangar

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Aircraft Hangar | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Aircraft Hangar
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Aircraft Hangar

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Aircraft Hangar, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance. A 70-ft hydraulic one-piece door on the 100-ft wall clears a.

You’re viewing:Aircraft Hangar·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 20′ Eave Height
  • Hydraulic Door Ready
  • Red Iron Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-AIRCRAFT-HANGARBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 aircraft hangar.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 80′ · 8,000 ground + loft

Aircraft Hangar layout.

Private pilots and flight-school operators order the 100×80 as a T-hangar replacement that houses two Cessna 182s or a single King Air with wing clearance. A 70-ft hydraulic one-piece door on the 100-ft wall clears a 14-ft tail without jacking the eave past 20 ft.

💡 Pro tip:Aircraft Hangar works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Aircraft Hangar in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Aircraft Hangar.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Aircraft Hangar spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Aircraft Hangar.

DAILY USEEveryday aircraft hangar
Everyday aircraft hangar
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a aircraft hangar.
STORAGE OVERFLOWaircraft hangar + seasonal storage
aircraft hangar + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Aircraft Hangar, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 aircraft hangar is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Aircraft Hangar shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Aircraft Hangar buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Aircraft Hangar

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Aircraft Hangar · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Aircraft Hangar also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Aircraft Hangar questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 aircraft hangar cost?

A 100×80 aircraft hangar from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 aircraft hangar price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud aircraft hangar ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 aircraft hangar?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud aircraft hangar different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 aircraft hangar need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 aircraft hangar delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 aircraft hangar without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 aircraft hangar.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 aircraft hangar?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 aircraft hangar in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 aircraft hangar meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Aircraft Hangar quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building warehouse with red roof, skid steer loader, and enclosed cargo trailer

100×80 Aircraft Hangar

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with black gable roof covering pickups, a boat and red tractor

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building | Steel and Stud, From $147,100

12

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Agricultural Metal Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×80 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle.

You’re viewing:Agricultural Metal Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open-Side Option
  • 800 Bale Capacity
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-AGRICULTURAL-METBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 agricultural metal building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Agricultural Metal Building layout.

Looking for a 100×80 agricultural metal building? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Agricultural-industrial operators run a 100×80 as a hay barn, equipment shed, or cattle handling facility. At 9,8000 sq ft you store roughly 800 large round bales stacked three high or park a combine, two tractors, and a sprayer with maintenance access. Open-side or partially enclosed configurations dominate this use.

💡 Pro tip:Agricultural Metal Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Agricultural Metal Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Agricultural Metal Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Agricultural Metal Building.

DAILY USEEveryday agricultural metal building
Everyday agricultural metal building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a agricultural metal building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWagricultural metal building + seasonal storage
agricultural metal building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 agricultural metal building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Agricultural Metal Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Agricultural Metal Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Agricultural Metal Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Agricultural Metal Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 agricultural metal building cost?

A 100×80 agricultural metal building from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 agricultural metal building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud agricultural metal building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 agricultural metal building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud agricultural metal building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 agricultural metal building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 agricultural metal building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 agricultural metal building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 100×80 agricultural metal building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 agricultural metal building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 agricultural metal building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 agricultural metal building stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Agricultural Metal Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal carport with black gable roof covering pickups, a boat and red tractor

100×80 Agricultural Metal Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×80 Cold Storage Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Cold Storage Building | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Cold Storage Building
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Cold Storage Building

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Cold Storage Building, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×80 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and.

You’re viewing:Cold Storage Building·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • IMP Panels
  • Spray Foam
  • Two-Zone Layout
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-COLD-STORAGE-BUIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 cold storage building.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft shop

Cold Storage Building layout.

Our 100×80 cold storage building fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a heavy-gauge frame rated for forklifts and machinery. Cold storage operators insulate a 100×80 PEMB with closed-cell spray foam and insulated metal panels for refrigerated produce, dairy, or pharma staging. The 9,8000 sq ft layout supports two temperature zones split by an interior partition, with vapor-sealed framed openings sized for thermal roll-ups.

💡 Pro tip:Cold Storage Building works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Cold Storage Building in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Cold Storage Building.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Cold Storage Building spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Cold Storage Building.

DAILY USEEveryday cold storage building
Everyday cold storage building
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a cold storage building.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcold storage building + seasonal storage
cold storage building + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Cold Storage Building, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 cold storage building is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Cold Storage Building shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Cold Storage Building buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Cold Storage Building

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Cold Storage Building · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Cold Storage Building also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Cold Storage Building questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 cold storage building cost?

A 100×80 cold storage building from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 cold storage building price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud cold storage building ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 cold storage building?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud cold storage building different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 cold storage building need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 cold storage building delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 cold storage building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 cold storage building.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 cold storage building?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 cold storage building in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 cold storage building handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 cold storage building ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Cold Storage Building quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure warehouse interior with forklift moving boxes between tall pallet racking

100×80 Cold Storage Building

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×80 Riding Arena

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Riding Arena | Steel and Stud, From $147,100

12

100×80 Riding Arena
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$167,700$147,100SAVE $20,600
or $3065/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Riding Arena

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Riding Arena, built for farm and ranch demands.

Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full.

You’re viewing:Riding Arena·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$147,100$167,700Save $20,600
or as low as $3065/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$147,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Eave Height
  • 2x Sliding Barn Doors
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-RIDING-ARENABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 riding arena.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Riding Arena layout.

Equestrian buyers spec the 100×80 as a covered riding arena because 80 ft of width clears a standard dressage rectangle with kick-wall room to spare. Sliding barn doors at both gable ends let trainers run a full figure-eight, and 16-ft eaves keep dust-down sprinklers out of a rider’s hat.

💡 Pro tip:Riding Arena works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Riding Arena in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Riding Arena.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Riding Arena spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Riding Arena.

DAILY USEEveryday riding arena
Everyday riding arena
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a riding arena.
STORAGE OVERFLOWriding arena + seasonal storage
riding arena + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Riding Arena, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3065/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 riding arena is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3065/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Riding Arena shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Riding Arena buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Riding Arena

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Riding Arena · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Riding Arena also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Riding Arena questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 riding arena cost?

A 100×80 riding arena from Steel and Stud starts at $147,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3065/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 riding arena price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud riding arena ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 riding arena?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud riding arena different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 riding arena need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 riding arena delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 riding arena without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3065/month on a 100×80 riding arena.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 riding arena?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 riding arena in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 riding arena stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Riding Arena quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Monitor roof steel barn in red with open aisle stalls, a popular metal barn kit style

100×80 Riding Arena

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$147,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with white sectional door and covered porch workbench in mountain pines

100×80 Fabrication Shop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Fabrication Shop | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Fabrication Shop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Fabrication Shop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Fabrication Shop, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and fabricators run the 100×80 industrial steel building as a heavy fab shop with two.

You’re viewing:Fabrication Shop·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Crane-Ready
  • Pull-Through Bays
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-FABRICATION-SHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 fabrication shop.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Fabrication Shop layout.

Looking for a 100×80 fabrication shop? At 8000 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Welders and fabricators run the 100×80 industrial steel building as a heavy fab shop with two pull-through bays for trailer-length work. Reinforced roof framing supports a 5-ton bridge crane, and 18-foot eaves clear most rolled stock racks. Concrete slab spec runs 6 inches with rebar at this load class.

💡 Pro tip:Fabrication Shop works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Fabrication Shop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fabrication Shop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fabrication Shop spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fabrication Shop.

DAILY USEEveryday fabrication shop
Everyday fabrication shop
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fabrication shop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfabrication shop + seasonal storage
fabrication shop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Fabrication Shop, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 fabrication shop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fabrication Shop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Fabrication Shop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Fabrication Shop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fabrication Shop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fabrication Shop also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fabrication Shop questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 fabrication shop cost?

A 100×80 fabrication shop from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 fabrication shop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fabrication shop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 fabrication shop?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fabrication shop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 fabrication shop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 fabrication shop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 fabrication shop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 fabrication shop.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 fabrication shop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 fabrication shop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 fabrication shop handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 fabrication shop ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Fabrication Shop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with white sectional door and covered porch workbench in mountain pines

100×80 Fabrication Shop

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×80 Self-Storage Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Self-Storage Facility | Steel and Stud, From $148,300

12

100×80 Self-Storage Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,050$148,300SAVE $20,750
or $3090/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Self-Storage Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Self-Storage Facility, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×80 metal building as a single-story.

You’re viewing:Self-Storage Facility·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,300$169,050Save $20,750
or as low as $3090/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Steel Partitions
  • 60+ Units
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-SELF-STORAGE-FACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 self-storage facility.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft shop

Self-Storage Facility layout.

Our 100×80 self-storage facility fits 100-foot widths and 80-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Commercial real estate investors build a 100×80 metal building as a single-story self-storage with roughly 60–75 mixed-size units accessed by interior corridors. Lower 12-foot legs keep cubage costs down, and steel-stud partitions divide the interior bays without reframing the shell.

💡 Pro tip:Self-Storage Facility works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Self-Storage Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Self-Storage Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Self-Storage Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Self-Storage Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday self-storage facility
Everyday self-storage facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a self-storage facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWself-storage facility + seasonal storage
self-storage facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Self-Storage Facility, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3090/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 self-storage facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3090/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Self-Storage Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Self-Storage Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Self-Storage Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Self-Storage Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Self-Storage Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Self-Storage Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 self-storage facility cost?

A 100×80 self-storage facility from Steel and Stud starts at $148,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3090/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 self-storage facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud self-storage facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 self-storage facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud self-storage facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 self-storage facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 self-storage facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 self-storage facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3090/month on a 100×80 self-storage facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 self-storage facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 self-storage facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 100×80 self-storage facility meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Self-Storage Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green commercial metal building storage units at night with soffit lighting over doors

100×80 Self-Storage Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance | Steel and Stud, From $148,700

12

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$169,500$148,700SAVE $20,800
or $3098/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Truck and Fleet Maintenance

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space. Fleet operators spec a 100×80 with three 100×80 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits.

You’re viewing:Truck and Fleet Maintenance·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$148,700$169,500Save $20,800
or as low as $3098/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$148,700
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 14×14 Roll-Ups
  • Pull-Through
  • Class 8 Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-TRUCK-FLEET-MAINBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. 100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 80′ · 8,000 sq ft

Truck and Fleet Maintenance layout.

100×80 delivers 8000 sq ft of heavy-duty truck and fleet maintenance space. Fleet operators spec a 100×80 with three 100×80 roll-ups on the long wall for pull-through service of Class 8 tractors. The 100-foot depth fits a tractor-trailer fully inside with the door closed, and 20-foot legs accommodate lifts and exhaust extraction systems.

💡 Pro tip:Truck and Fleet Maintenance works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Truck and Fleet Maintenance spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Truck and Fleet Maintenance.

DAILY USEEveryday truck and fleet maintenance
Everyday truck and fleet maintenance
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a truck and fleet maintenance.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtruck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
truck and fleet maintenance + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3098/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3098/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Truck and Fleet Maintenance shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Truck and Fleet Maintenance · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Truck and Fleet Maintenance also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🎯 100×80

Indoor Sports Facility

100×80 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$146,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Truck and Fleet Maintenance questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance cost?

A 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance from Steel and Stud starts at $148,700 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3098/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud truck and fleet maintenance different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3098/month on a 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×80 truck and fleet maintenance ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Truck and Fleet Maintenance quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel building with red trim housing a logistics company and delivery van fleet

100×80 Truck and Fleet Maintenance

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$148,700.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility | Steel and Stud, From $146,450

12

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$166,950$146,450SAVE $20,500
or $3051/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×80Indoor Sports Facility

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility, built for hobby and recreational use.

Youth sports developers drop a regulation high-school basketball court (84’x50′) inside a 100×80 with bleacher room on both baselines. 18-ft eaves clear the rim-plus-backboard-plus-net arc, and vertical panels keep.

You’re viewing:Indoor Sports Facility·Size100×80·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$146,450$166,950Save $20,500
or as low as $3051/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×80
100×80
this size
$146,450
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 8,000 sq ft enclosed
  • 18′ Eave Height
  • Vertical Roof
  • R-13 Acoustic
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X80-INDOOR-SPORTS-FABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×80 indoor sports facility.

100 feet wide × 80 feet long. Youth sports developers drop a regulation high-school basketball court (84’x50′) inside a 100×80 with bleacher room on both baselines.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑100′ × 80′ · 8,000 ground + loft

Indoor Sports Facility layout.

Youth sports developers drop a regulation high-school basketball court (84’x50′) inside a 100×80 with bleacher room on both baselines. 18-ft eaves clear the rim-plus-backboard-plus-net arc, and vertical panels keep ball-strike noise down compared to horizontal ribbing.

💡 Pro tip:Indoor Sports Facility works well at 100×80, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×80 Indoor Sports Facility in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Indoor Sports Facility.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
8,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×80 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Indoor Sports Facility spec sheet.

Width100′
Length80′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space8,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Indoor Sports Facility.

DAILY USEEveryday indoor sports facility
Everyday indoor sports facility
8,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a indoor sports facility.
STORAGE OVERFLOWindoor sports facility + seasonal storage
indoor sports facility + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility, what makes it different.

8,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3051/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×80 indoor sports facility is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3051/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×80?

8,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 80′ footprint with 8,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $64,000–$96,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Indoor Sports Facility shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×80 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×80 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×80 Indoor Sports Facility buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×80 Indoor Sports Facility

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Indoor Sports Facility · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×81×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$36,000+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Indoor Sports Facility also viewed:

🏢 100×80

Distribution Center

100×80 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×80

Warehouse Steel Building

100×80 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×80

Manufacturing Facility

100×80 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×80

Commercial Workshop

100×80 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×80

Aircraft Hangar

100×80 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×80

Agricultural Metal Building

100×80 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×80

Cold Storage Building

100×80 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×80

Riding Arena

100×80 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$147,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×80

Fabrication Shop

100×80 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×80

Self-Storage Facility

100×80 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×80

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×80 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$148,700Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Indoor Sports Facility questions, answered.

How much does a 100×80 indoor sports facility cost?

A 100×80 indoor sports facility from Steel and Stud starts at $146,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3051/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×80 indoor sports facility price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud indoor sports facility ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×80 indoor sports facility?

Almost always for 8,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud indoor sports facility different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×80 indoor sports facility need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×80 indoor sports facility delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×80 indoor sports facility without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3051/month on a 100×80 indoor sports facility.

What warranty comes with the 100×80 indoor sports facility?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×80 indoor sports facility in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 100×80 indoor sports facility for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a indoor sports facility to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Indoor Sports Facility quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building sports facility at twilight with athletes leaving lit batting cages

100×80 Indoor Sports Facility

8,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 80′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×80 steel building delivers 8,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$146,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with single-slope roof and open bays serving as a steel structure field shelter

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor | Steel and Stud, From $16,250

12

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length.

You’re viewing:RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×110
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Drive-Through Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-RV-TRAVEL-TRAILEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

TruckTrailer10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft pass-through

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. RV owners with Class A motorhomes or fifth-wheels park three full-length rigs end-to-end under one continuous roof. The 100-foot run swallows a 40-foot diesel pusher plus two travel trailers with room for a tongue jack. 12-14 ft legs clear roof AC units and satellite domes.

💡 Pro tip:RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor.

DAILY USEEveryday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
Everyday rv & travel trailer storage corridor
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a rv & travel trailer storage corridor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWrv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
rv & travel trailer storage corridor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor also viewed:

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor cost?

A 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud rv & travel trailer storage corridor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a rv & travel trailer storage corridor to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed with single-slope roof and open bays serving as a steel structure field shelter

10×110 RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel building fabrication shop at sunset with welding glow inside and steel tubing stacked outside

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed | Steel and Stud, From $16,900

12

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

10×110 delivers 1100 sq ft of rugged hay & equipment run-in shed space. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor through the open gable. The narrow 10-foot depth keeps hay.

You’re viewing:Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×110
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Open Sides
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-HAY-EQUIPMENT-RUBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. 10×110 delivers 1100 sq ft of rugged hay & equipment run-in shed space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed layout.

10×110 delivers 1100 sq ft of rugged hay & equipment run-in shed space. Hobby farmers stack round bales five-wide along the 100-foot wall and pull a tractor through the open gable. The narrow 10-foot depth keeps hay close to the loader and out of weather. Open-sided configuration ventilates the stack while the steel roof sheds rain.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & equipment run-in shed
Everyday hay & equipment run-in shed
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & equipment run-in shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
hay & equipment run-in shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed cost?

A 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & equipment run-in shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel building fabrication shop at sunset with welding glow inside and steel tubing stacked outside

10×110 Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Hunter green steel barn with cupola, weathervane and sliding doors against rolling hills

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay | Steel and Stud, From $18,100

12

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Contractor Supply & Van Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 10×110 contractor supply & van bay fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the end bay.

You’re viewing:Contractor Supply & Van Bay·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$16,600
10×110
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Van Pull-In
  • 26 GA Panels
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-CONTRACTOR-SUPPLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 contractor supply & van bay.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 10×110 contractor supply & van bay fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft shop

Contractor Supply & Van Bay layout.

Our 10×110 contractor supply & van bay fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbers, electricians, and framers pull a service van straight into the end bay of the 10×110 and use the remaining 80 feet as a walk-in supply room for fittings, conduit, and fixtures. The narrow 10-foot depth keeps shelving and ladder racks within arm’s reach of the van’s side doors for fast morning loadouts.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Supply & Van Bay works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Supply & Van Bay spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Supply & Van Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor supply & van bay
Everyday contractor supply & van bay
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor supply & van bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
contractor supply & van bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 contractor supply & van bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Supply & Van Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Supply & Van Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Supply & Van Bay also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Supply & Van Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay cost?

A 10×110 contractor supply & van bay from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 contractor supply & van bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor supply & van bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 10×110 contractor supply & van bay.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 contractor supply & van bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 contractor supply & van bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×110 contractor supply & van bay meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Supply & Van Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Hunter green steel barn with cupola, weathervane and sliding doors against rolling hills

10×110 Contractor Supply & Van Bay

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building with cream roll up door and shop sign below mountain peaks

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench | Steel and Stud, From $16,250

12

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a side-yard run set up a 100-foot workbench down one.

You’re viewing:Long Workshop & Hobby Bench·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×110
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • A-Frame Roof
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-LONG-WORKSHOP-HOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench layout.

Our 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners with a side-yard run set up a 100-foot workbench down one wall and rolling tool chests down the other. Woodworkers love the linear layout for ripping 8-foot stock without crowding. Add three 10×110 windows for daylight along the long side.

💡 Pro tip:Long Workshop & Hobby Bench works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Long Workshop & Hobby Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday long workshop & hobby bench
Everyday long workshop & hobby bench
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a long workshop & hobby bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlong workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
long workshop & hobby bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Long Workshop & Hobby Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Long Workshop & Hobby Bench also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench cost?

A 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud long workshop & hobby bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×110 long workshop & hobby bench typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Long Workshop & Hobby Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green prefab metal building with cream roll up door and shop sign below mountain peaks

10×110 Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage | Steel and Stud, From $16,250

12

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Our 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski.

You’re viewing:Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×110
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • Hurricane Cert
  • Roll-Up Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-SINGLE-LANE-BOATBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare.

TruckTrailer10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft pass-through

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage layout.

Our 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a comfortable hobby retreat with sidewall room to spare. Marina-adjacent property owners stage 2-3 bass boats, jet ski trailers, and a center-console end-to-end. The 100-foot length covers a 22-foot wake boat with trailer plus a kayak rack. 11-13 ft legs clear T-tops and tower-mounted Bimini frames.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-lane boat & trailer storage
Everyday single-lane boat & trailer storage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-lane boat & trailer storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
single-lane boat & trailer storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage cost?

A 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-lane boat & trailer storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a single-lane boat & trailer storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan steel garage with open roll-up door storing a boat beside a mountain lake

10×110 Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel carport with attached enclosed garage sheltering a tractor and pickup at sunset

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack | Steel and Stud, From $18,500

12

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,100$18,500SAVE $2,600
or $385/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack 20-foot and 40-foot.

You’re viewing:Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,500$21,100Save $2,600
or as low as $385/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$17,000
10×110
this size
$18,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Forklift Clearance
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-PIPE-REBAR-LONG-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Looking for a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack layout.

Looking for a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Steel fabricators, irrigation contractors, and pool builders rack 20-foot and 40-foot lengths inside cantilever stands along the 100-foot wall. Forklift access through both gables turns the building into a covered drive-through pull yard for long material.

💡 Pro tip:Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack.

DAILY USEEveryday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
Everyday pipe, rebar & long-stock rack
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
pipe, rebar & long-stock rack + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$385/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $385/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack cost?

A 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack from Steel and Stud starts at $18,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $385/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pipe, rebar & long-stock rack different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $385/month on a 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel carport with attached enclosed garage sheltering a tractor and pickup at sunset

10×110 Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal building kit woodshop with roll-up door, pickup truck, and stacked lumber outside

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow | Steel and Stud, From $16,900

12

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers convert the 10×110 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area.

You’re viewing:Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×110
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Dutch Doors
  • Insulated Roof
  • Wood Trim
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-SINGLE-ROW-HORSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers convert the 10×110 into eight 12-foot shedrow stalls with a 4-foot tack area. Dutch doors face outward along the long sidewall for fresh air; horses see daylight without sharing aisle space. Common build for boarding barns on narrow paddock strips.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow.

DAILY USEEveryday single-row horse stall shedrow
Everyday single-row horse stall shedrow
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-row horse stall shedrow.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
single-row horse stall shedrow + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow cost?

A 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-row horse stall shedrow different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal building kit woodshop with roll-up door, pickup truck, and stacked lumber outside

10×110 Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with brown roof sheltering two vehicles against desert mountains

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover | Steel and Stud, From $18,100

12

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,650$18,100SAVE $2,550
or $377/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an open-sided.

You’re viewing:Outdoor Shooting Range Cover·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,100$20,650Save $2,550
or as low as $377/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$16,600
10×110
this size
$18,100
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Front
  • Low Eave
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-OUTDOOR-SHOOTINGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover layout.

Our 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Gun clubs and private ranges cover a 100-foot firing line with an open-sided 10×110 to keep shooters dry without obstructing target sightlines. The narrow depth puts the roof directly over the bench while leaving downrange visibility wide open.

💡 Pro tip:Outdoor Shooting Range Cover works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Outdoor Shooting Range Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday outdoor shooting range cover
Everyday outdoor shooting range cover
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a outdoor shooting range cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWoutdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
outdoor shooting range cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$377/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $377/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Outdoor Shooting Range Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Outdoor Shooting Range Cover also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover cost?

A 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover from Steel and Stud starts at $18,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $377/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud outdoor shooting range cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $377/month on a 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 10×110 outdoor shooting range cover meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Outdoor Shooting Range Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with brown roof sheltering two vehicles against desert mountains

10×110 Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with brown roll-up door surrounded by desert plants and mountains

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage | Steel and Stud, From $16,250

12

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$18,550$16,250SAVE $2,300
or $339/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Property-Line Detached Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Our 10×110 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners on narrow city lots squeeze a single-car-wide detached.

You’re viewing:Property-Line Detached Garage·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,250$18,550Save $2,300
or as low as $339/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$14,750
10×110
this size
$16,250
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Fully Enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-PROPERTY-LINE-DEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 property-line detached garage.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Our 10×110 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Property-Line Detached Garage layout.

Our 10×110 property-line detached garage fits 10-foot widths and 110-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners on narrow city lots squeeze a single-car-wide detached garage along the side setback with room left for a workshop, lawn equipment, and bike storage. One 10×110 roll-up at the driveway end, walk-in door mid-building, storage to the rear.

💡 Pro tip:Property-Line Detached Garage works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Property-Line Detached Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Property-Line Detached Garage spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Property-Line Detached Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday property-line detached garage
Everyday property-line detached garage
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a property-line detached garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWproperty-line detached garage + seasonal storage
property-line detached garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$339/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 property-line detached garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $339/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Property-Line Detached Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Property-Line Detached Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Property-Line Detached Garage also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Property-Line Detached Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 property-line detached garage cost?

A 10×110 property-line detached garage from Steel and Stud starts at $16,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $339/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 property-line detached garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud property-line detached garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 property-line detached garage?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud property-line detached garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 property-line detached garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 property-line detached garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 property-line detached garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $339/month on a 10×110 property-line detached garage.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 property-line detached garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 property-line detached garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 10×110 property-line detached garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 10×110 property-line detached garage typically adds $8,800–$13,200 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Property-Line Detached Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal garage with brown roll-up door surrounded by desert plants and mountains

10×110 Property-Line Detached Garage

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench | Steel and Stud, From $16,900

12

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$19,250$16,900SAVE $2,350
or $352/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-scale growers attach the 10×110 to the long side of a greenhouse range as.

You’re viewing:Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$16,900$19,250Save $2,350
or as low as $352/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$15,400
10×110
this size
$16,900
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Ready
  • R-13 Insulation
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-GREENHOUSE-HEADHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Looking for a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench layout.

Looking for a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-scale growers attach the 10×110 to the long side of a greenhouse range as a headhouse, potting benches down one wall, propagation racks down the other. The 100-foot length matches typical greenhouse bay lengths for clean attachment.

💡 Pro tip:Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday greenhouse headhouse & potting bench
Everyday greenhouse headhouse & potting bench
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a greenhouse headhouse & potting bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgreenhouse headhouse & potting bench + seasonal storage
greenhouse headhouse & potting bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$352/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $352/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench cost?

A 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench from Steel and Stud starts at $16,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $352/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud greenhouse headhouse & potting bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud greenhouse headhouse & potting bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $352/month on a 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure potting shed with copper colored roof and open french doors in a garden

10×110 Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$16,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with vertical roof sheltering a truck and SUV near forested mountains

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion | Steel and Stud, From $18,200

12

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$20,750$18,200SAVE $2,550
or $379/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Park & Trailhead Pavilion

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion, engineered to code for assembly use.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Parks departments and trail associations cover a 100-foot bench line with an.

You’re viewing:Park & Trailhead Pavilion·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,200$20,750Save $2,550
or as low as $379/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$16,700
10×110
this size
$18,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Sides
  • IBC Certified
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-PARK-TRAILHEAD-PBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Park & Trailhead Pavilion layout.

Built for community organizations and public assembly use, this 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion packs 1100 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Parks departments and trail associations cover a 100-foot bench line with an open-sided 10×110 for shade and rain shelter at trailheads, beach parking lots, and event staging areas. Engineered for high public-use wind and snow loads.

💡 Pro tip:Park & Trailhead Pavilion works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Park & Trailhead Pavilion.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Park & Trailhead Pavilion spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Park & Trailhead Pavilion.

DAILY USEEveryday park & trailhead pavilion
Everyday park & trailhead pavilion
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a park & trailhead pavilion.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpark & trailhead pavilion + seasonal storage
park & trailhead pavilion + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$379/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $379/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Park & Trailhead Pavilion shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Park & Trailhead Pavilion · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Park & Trailhead Pavilion also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏭 10×110

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

10×110 carwash & detail drive-through configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carwash & Detail Drive-Through →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Park & Trailhead Pavilion questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion cost?

A 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion from Steel and Stud starts at $18,200 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $379/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud park & trailhead pavilion ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud park & trailhead pavilion different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $379/month on a 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 park & trailhead pavilion pass community-use and assembly inspections?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s engineered drawings include load calculations, accessibility paths, and egress widths required by most jurisdictions for assembly and institutional use. Stamped, sealed PE drawings are included free with every order.

Ready to build?

Your Park & Trailhead Pavilion quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal carport with vertical roof sheltering a truck and SUV near forested mountains

10×110 Park & Trailhead Pavilion

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,200.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green commercial metal building fabrication shop with welder, forklift, and steel inventory

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through | Steel and Stud, From $18,500

12

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$21,100$18,500SAVE $2,600
or $385/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings10×110Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

Looking for a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Detailers and self-service operators cover a 100-foot wash lane with the 10×110 to.

You’re viewing:Carwash & Detail Drive-Through·Size10×110·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$18,500$21,100Save $2,600
or as low as $385/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 10×110
10×100
smaller
$17,000
10×110
this size
$18,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 1,100 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Gables
  • Drive-Through
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-10X110-CARWASH-DETAIL-DBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through.

10 feet wide × 110 feet long. Looking for a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area10′ × 110′ · 1,100 sq ft

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through layout.

Looking for a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through? At 1100 sq ft, this footprint suits fabrication, heavy machinery, or warehousing. Detailers and self-service operators cover a 100-foot wash lane with the 10×110 to keep crews and customers dry. The narrow 10-foot width matches a single bay, and the open-gable configuration lets vehicles pull straight through without backing.

💡 Pro tip:Carwash & Detail Drive-Through works well at 10×110, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
1,100 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 10×110 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through spec sheet.

Width10′
Length110′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space1,100 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carwash & Detail Drive-Through.

DAILY USEEveryday carwash & detail drive-through
Everyday carwash & detail drive-through
1,100 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carwash & detail drive-through.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarwash & detail drive-through + seasonal storage
carwash & detail drive-through + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through, what makes it different.

1,100sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$385/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $385/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 10×110?

1,100 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 10′ × 110′ footprint with 1,100 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $8,800–$13,200 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carwash & Detail Drive-Through shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 10×110 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 10×110 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
11×111×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$4,950+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carwash & Detail Drive-Through also viewed:

🎯 10×110

RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor

10×110 rv & travel trailer storage corridor configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Travel Trailer Storage Corridor →

🌾 10×110

Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed

10×110 hay & equipment run-in shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hay & Equipment Run-In Shed →

🏢 10×110

Contractor Supply & Van Bay

10×110 contractor supply & van bay configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Supply & Van Bay →

🏡 10×110

Long Workshop & Hobby Bench

10×110 long workshop & hobby bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Long Workshop & Hobby Bench →

🎯 10×110

Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage

10×110 single-lane boat & trailer storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Lane Boat & Trailer Storage →

🏭 10×110

Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack

10×110 pipe, rebar & long-stock rack configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,500Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pipe, Rebar & Long-Stock Rack →

🌾 10×110

Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow

10×110 single-row horse stall shedrow configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Row Horse Stall Shedrow →

🏢 10×110

Outdoor Shooting Range Cover

10×110 outdoor shooting range cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Outdoor Shooting Range Cover →

🏡 10×110

Property-Line Detached Garage

10×110 property-line detached garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Property-Line Detached Garage →

🌾 10×110

Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench

10×110 greenhouse headhouse & potting bench configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$16,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Greenhouse Headhouse & Potting Bench →

🏛️ 10×110

Park & Trailhead Pavilion

10×110 park & trailhead pavilion configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$18,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Park & Trailhead Pavilion →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carwash & Detail Drive-Through questions, answered.

How much does a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through cost?

A 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through from Steel and Stud starts at $18,500 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $385/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carwash & detail drive-through ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through?

Almost always for 1,100+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carwash & detail drive-through different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $385/month on a 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through.

What warranty comes with the 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 10×110 carwash & detail drive-through ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Carwash & Detail Drive-Through quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green commercial metal building fabrication shop with welder, forklift, and steel inventory

10×110 Carwash & Detail Drive-Through

1,100 sq ft for metal garage, workshop, or horse barn

10′ x 110′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 10×110 steel building delivers 1,100 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$18,500.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×12 Backyard Home Office

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space. Remote workers convert a 12×12 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in. R-19 batts in the walls, double-bubble in the roof, a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • French Door
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 backyard home office.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. 12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of everyday backyard home office space. Remote workers convert a 12×12 steel building into an insulated home office for under $10K all-in. R-19 batts in the walls, double-bubble in the roof, a mini-split, and one French door makes a quiet 144 sq ft workspace separated from the house. Run conduit before slab pour.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 backyard home office cost?

A 12×12 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 backyard home office?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 backyard home office typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Muted charcoal prefab metal building yoga studio with monitor style windows and glass doors

12×12 Backyard Home Office

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red prefab metal building shed with ATV and yellow mower inside, rolling hills behind

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Zero-Turn Mower Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the.

You’re viewing:Zero-Turn Mower Garage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • Mower Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-ZERO-TURN-MOWER-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 zero-turn mower garage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Zero-Turn Mower Garage layout.

Looking for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Built for homeowners with a John Deere or Cub Cadet zero-turn that’s outgrowing the garage. A 12×12 or 12×12 roll-up door clears a riding mower with the deck on, and 144 sq ft leaves room for fuel cans, a trimmer, and a wall of pegboard. Order with a roll-up door pre-installed.

💡 Pro tip:Zero-Turn Mower Garage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Zero-Turn Mower Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Zero-Turn Mower Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday zero-turn mower garage
Everyday zero-turn mower garage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a zero-turn mower garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWzero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
zero-turn mower garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 zero-turn mower garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Zero-Turn Mower Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Zero-Turn Mower Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Zero-Turn Mower Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Zero-Turn Mower Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage cost?

A 12×12 zero-turn mower garage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud zero-turn mower garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 zero-turn mower garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 zero-turn mower garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 zero-turn mower garage typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Zero-Turn Mower Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red prefab metal building shed with ATV and yellow mower inside, rolling hills behind

12×12 Zero-Turn Mower Garage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black steel building backyard studio with lit windows, garage door and garden bench at dusk

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Garden Shed with Windows

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×12 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Windows·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 2 Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • Vented Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GARDEN-SHED-WINDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 garden shed with windows.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Windows layout.

Our 12×12 garden shed with windows fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Gardeners spec this with two 12×12 windows and a 36-inch walk-in door for potting, seed-starting, and tool storage. The vertical-panel walls handle splash from a hose-down without rotting, and the 10-foot width fits a potting bench plus floor-to-ceiling shelving on the opposite wall.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Windows works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Windows.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Windows spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Windows.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with windows
Everyday garden shed with windows
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with windows.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with windows + seasonal storage
garden shed with windows + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 garden shed with windows is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Windows shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Windows · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Windows also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Windows questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 garden shed with windows cost?

A 12×12 garden shed with windows from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 garden shed with windows price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with windows ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 garden shed with windows?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with windows different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 garden shed with windows need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 garden shed with windows delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 garden shed with windows without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 garden shed with windows.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 garden shed with windows?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 garden shed with windows in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 garden shed with windows add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 garden shed with windows typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Windows quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black steel building backyard studio with lit windows, garage door and garden bench at dusk

12×12 Garden Shed with Windows

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Pool Equipment & Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space. Pool owners use 144 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other. Galvalume panels.

You’re viewing:Pool Equipment & Cabana·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Finish
  • Locking Door
  • Chemical-Safe
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-POOL-EQUIPMENT-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 pool equipment & cabana.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. 12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 12′ · 144 ground + loft

Pool Equipment & Cabana layout.

12×12 delivers 144 sq ft of hobby-ready pool equipment & cabana space. Pool owners use 144 sq ft to house the pump, filter, heater, and chemicals on one side and changing-room storage on the other. Galvalume panels resist chlorine vapor better than wood, and a 36-inch walk-in door with a deadbolt locks up chemicals when kids are around.

💡 Pro tip:Pool Equipment & Cabana works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool Equipment & Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool Equipment & Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool Equipment & Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool equipment & cabana
Everyday pool equipment & cabana
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool equipment & cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
pool equipment & cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 pool equipment & cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool Equipment & Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool Equipment & Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool Equipment & Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool Equipment & Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana cost?

A 12×12 pool equipment & cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool equipment & cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 pool equipment & cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 pool equipment & cabana for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a pool equipment & cabana to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Pool Equipment & Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

12×12 Pool Equipment & Cabana

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Workshop & Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press.

You’re viewing:Workshop & Hobby Room·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
12×30
longer
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 9′ Legs
  • 1 Window
  • 14 GA Tubular
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-WORKSHOP-HOBBY-RBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 workshop & hobby room.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Workshop & Hobby Room layout.

Our 12×12 workshop & hobby room fits 12-foot widths and 12-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Hobbyists run a 10-foot workbench down the long wall, a 4-foot drill press station on the short wall, and still walk a project around. 9-foot legs give clearance for wall-mounted lumber racks. Add a window over the bench for natural light and a 60-amp subpanel for tools.

💡 Pro tip:Workshop & Hobby Room works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Workshop & Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Workshop & Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Workshop & Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday workshop & hobby room
Everyday workshop & hobby room
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a workshop & hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWworkshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
workshop & hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 workshop & hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Workshop & Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Workshop & Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Workshop & Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Workshop & Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room cost?

A 12×12 workshop & hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 workshop & hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 workshop & hobby room?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud workshop & hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 workshop & hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 workshop & hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 workshop & hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 workshop & hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 workshop & hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 workshop & hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 workshop & hobby room typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Workshop & Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal shed converted to backyard office studio with black trim and large windows

12×12 Workshop & Hobby Room

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Bike & Sports Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×12 utility shed to clear.

You’re viewing:Bike & Sports Storage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Double Doors
  • Wall Hooks Ready
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-BIKE-SPORTS-STORBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 bike & sports storage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Bike & Sports Storage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 bike & sports storage packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Families with four-plus bikes, kayaks, and sports gear use a 12×12 utility shed to clear the garage. Wall-mounted vertical bike hooks fit eight bikes on one 12-foot wall. The 10-foot depth handles a 9-foot kayak diagonal-stored. A double-door front opening makes haul-in-haul-out painless.

💡 Pro tip:Bike & Sports Storage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Bike & Sports Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Bike & Sports Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Bike & Sports Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday bike & sports storage
Everyday bike & sports storage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a bike & sports storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbike & sports storage + seasonal storage
bike & sports storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 bike & sports storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Bike & Sports Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Bike & Sports Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Bike & Sports Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Bike & Sports Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 bike & sports storage cost?

A 12×12 bike & sports storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 bike & sports storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud bike & sports storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 bike & sports storage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud bike & sports storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 bike & sports storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 bike & sports storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 bike & sports storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 bike & sports storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 bike & sports storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 bike & sports storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 bike & sports storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 bike & sports storage typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Bike & Sports Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit gym with folding glass doors open to dumbbell rack and bench

12×12 Bike & Sports Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter | Steel and Stud, From $2,800

12

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,200$2,800SAVE $400
or $58/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Chicken Coop Shelter

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×12 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel.

You’re viewing:Chicken Coop Shelter·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,800$3,200Save $400
or as low as $58/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Vented Gables
  • Predator-Proof
  • Galvalume Walls
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-CHICKEN-COOP-SHEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 chicken coop shelter.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Chicken Coop Shelter layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 chicken coop shelter packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Small property owners convert a 12×12 metal building into a predator-proof coop for 15-20 hens. Steel framing won’t be chewed by raccoons, and Galvalume walls hose-clean. Add a partial side opening for a covered run, vented gables for summer airflow, and a walk-in door for daily egg collection.

💡 Pro tip:Chicken Coop Shelter works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Chicken Coop Shelter.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Chicken Coop Shelter spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Chicken Coop Shelter.

DAILY USEEveryday chicken coop shelter
Everyday chicken coop shelter
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a chicken coop shelter.
STORAGE OVERFLOWchicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
chicken coop shelter + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$58/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 chicken coop shelter is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $58/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Chicken Coop Shelter shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Chicken Coop Shelter · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Chicken Coop Shelter also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Chicken Coop Shelter questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 chicken coop shelter cost?

A 12×12 chicken coop shelter from Steel and Stud starts at $2,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $58/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 chicken coop shelter price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 chicken coop shelter?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud chicken coop shelter different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 chicken coop shelter need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 chicken coop shelter delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 chicken coop shelter without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $58/month on a 12×12 chicken coop shelter.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 chicken coop shelter?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 chicken coop shelter in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×12 chicken coop shelter stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Chicken Coop Shelter quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal shed with single-slope roof and open front in rocky mountain terrain

12×12 Chicken Coop Shelter

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue prefab metal building with cream roll-up door and walk door in a flower garden

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $2,800

12

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$3,200$2,800SAVE $400
or $58/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush.

You’re viewing:Garden Tractor & Implement Shed·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,800$3,200Save $400
or as low as $58/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,800
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • 9′ Legs
  • Implement Clearance
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GARDEN-TRACTOR-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft shop

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers store a sub-compact tractor with the bucket dropped, plus a tiller and brush hog. 9-foot legs and a 12×12 roll-up door clear the ROPS on most Kubota BX and John Deere 1-series tractors. The 12-foot depth fits the tractor with implements still attached.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Tractor & Implement Shed works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Tractor & Implement Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday garden tractor & implement shed
Everyday garden tractor & implement shed
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden tractor & implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
garden tractor & implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$58/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $58/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Tractor & Implement Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Tractor & Implement Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed cost?

A 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $2,800 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $58/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden tractor & implement shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $58/month on a 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×12 garden tractor & implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Tractor & Implement Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue prefab metal building with cream roll-up door and walk door in a flower garden

12×12 Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,800.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Concrete Anchors
  • Locking Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-MOTORCYCLE-SNOWMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage layout.

Looking for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders fit two motorcycles plus gear on one half and a snowmobile or ATV on the other. The 12-foot depth clears a full-dress touring bike with saddlebags. Specify a concrete slab and add a heavy-duty padlocked roll-up. Steel and Stud welds the frame to skip the chain-link feel of a kit.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
Everyday motorcycle & snowmobile storage
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle & snowmobile storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
motorcycle & snowmobile storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage cost?

A 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle & snowmobile storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle & snowmobile storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

12×12 Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12Generator & Utility Enclosure

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize.

You’re viewing:Generator & Utility Enclosure·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Louvered Vents
  • NEC Clearance
  • Vented Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-GENERATOR-UTILITBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 generator & utility enclosure.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 12′ · 144 sq ft

Generator & Utility Enclosure layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×12 generator & utility enclosure packs 144 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners with whole-house generators, well pumps, and battery storage centralize utilities in a 12×12 utility shed. Vented gables handle generator exhaust airflow, and the steel frame meets NEC clearance requirements better than a plastic enclosure. Add a walk-in door with louvered intake.

💡 Pro tip:Generator & Utility Enclosure works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Generator & Utility Enclosure.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Generator & Utility Enclosure spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Generator & Utility Enclosure.

DAILY USEEveryday generator & utility enclosure
Everyday generator & utility enclosure
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a generator & utility enclosure.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgenerator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
generator & utility enclosure + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 generator & utility enclosure is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Generator & Utility Enclosure shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Generator & Utility Enclosure · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Generator & Utility Enclosure also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🎯 12×12

She-Shed / Studio Retreat

12×12 she-shed / studio retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She-Shed / Studio Retreat →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Generator & Utility Enclosure questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure cost?

A 12×12 generator & utility enclosure from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud generator & utility enclosure different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 generator & utility enclosure in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×12 generator & utility enclosure add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×12 generator & utility enclosure typically adds $1,152–$1,728 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Generator & Utility Enclosure quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Backyard prefab metal building gym in coastal teal with double barn doors and treadmill

12×12 Generator & Utility Enclosure

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal building with lit windows and garage door beside a lake at dusk

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat | Steel and Stud, From $2,150

12

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$2,450$2,150SAVE $300
or $45/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×12She-Shed / Studio Retreat

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. A 144 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids. Spec it with two.

You’re viewing:She-Shed / Studio Retreat·Size12×12·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$2,150$2,450Save $300
or as low as $45/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×12
12×12
this size
$2,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 144 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • French Door
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X12-SHE-SHED-STUDIO-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat.

12 feet wide × 12 feet long. Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑12′ × 12′ · 144 ground + loft

She-Shed / Studio Retreat layout.

Looking for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat? At 144 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. A 144 sq ft studio for art, yoga, reading, or escape from the kids. Spec it with two windows, a French door, wainscoting in a contrasting color, and full insulation. The 10-foot ceiling-to-wall feel is open enough that 144 sq ft reads as a real room, not a closet.

💡 Pro tip:She-Shed / Studio Retreat works well at 12×12, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
144 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×12 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

She-Shed / Studio Retreat spec sheet.

Width12′
Length12′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space144 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use She-Shed / Studio Retreat.

DAILY USEEveryday she-shed / studio retreat
Everyday she-shed / studio retreat
144 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a she-shed / studio retreat.
STORAGE OVERFLOWshe-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
she-shed / studio retreat + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat, what makes it different.

144sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$45/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $45/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×12?

144 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 12′ footprint with 144 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,152–$1,728 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from She-Shed / Studio Retreat shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×12 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×12 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your She-Shed / Studio Retreat · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×13×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$648+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose She-Shed / Studio Retreat also viewed:

🏡 12×12

Backyard Storage Shed

12×12 backyard storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Storage Shed →

🏡 12×12

Zero-Turn Mower Garage

12×12 zero-turn mower garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Zero-Turn Mower Garage →

🏡 12×12

Garden Shed with Windows

12×12 garden shed with windows configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Shed with Windows →

🏡 12×12

Backyard Home Office

12×12 backyard home office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Home Office →

🎯 12×12

Pool Equipment & Cabana

12×12 pool equipment & cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool Equipment & Cabana →

🏡 12×12

Workshop & Hobby Room

12×12 workshop & hobby room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Workshop & Hobby Room →

🏡 12×12

Bike & Sports Storage

12×12 bike & sports storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Sports Storage →

🌾 12×12

Chicken Coop Shelter

12×12 chicken coop shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop Shelter →

🌾 12×12

Garden Tractor & Implement Shed

12×12 garden tractor & implement shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,800Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden Tractor & Implement Shed →

🎯 12×12

Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage

12×12 motorcycle & snowmobile storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & Snowmobile Storage →

🏡 12×12

Generator & Utility Enclosure

12×12 generator & utility enclosure configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$2,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Generator & Utility Enclosure →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

She-Shed / Studio Retreat questions, answered.

How much does a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat cost?

A 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat from Steel and Stud starts at $2,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $45/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat?

Almost always for 144+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud she-shed / studio retreat different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $45/month on a 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat.

What warranty comes with the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×12 she-shed / studio retreat for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a she-shed / studio retreat to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your She-Shed / Studio Retreat quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal building with lit windows and garage door beside a lake at dusk

12×12 She-Shed / Studio Retreat

144 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 12′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×12 steel building delivers 144 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$2,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Single-Vehicle Carport

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners shopping a 12×20 metal carport want covered parking without the cost of full.

You’re viewing:Single-Vehicle Carport·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • Free Install
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-SINGLE-VEHICLE-CBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 single-vehicle carport.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Single-Vehicle Carport layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 12×20 single-vehicle carport packs 240 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners shopping a 12×20 metal carport want covered parking without the cost of full enclosure. The footprint clears a Silverado, F-150, or Ram with cab room, and the 9′ leg height handles a roof rack or kayak load. Most buyers add a single closed end for wind protection on the prevailing side.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Vehicle Carport works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Vehicle Carport.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Vehicle Carport spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Vehicle Carport.

DAILY USEEveryday single-vehicle carport
Everyday single-vehicle carport
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-vehicle carport.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-vehicle carport + seasonal storage
single-vehicle carport + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 single-vehicle carport is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Vehicle Carport shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Vehicle Carport · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Vehicle Carport also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Vehicle Carport questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport cost?

A 12×20 single-vehicle carport from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 single-vehicle carport price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-vehicle carport ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 single-vehicle carport?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-vehicle carport different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 single-vehicle carport delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 single-vehicle carport without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 single-vehicle carport.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 single-vehicle carport?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 single-vehicle carport in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 single-vehicle carport add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 single-vehicle carport typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Vehicle Carport quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

12×20 Single-Vehicle Carport

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with open white roll-up door beside a mountain lake

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Enclosed Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space. A 12×20 metal garage gives you a lockable, weatherproof bay for a daily-driver sedan, a project car, or a motorcycle collection. Roll-up door on the.

You’re viewing:Enclosed Metal Garage·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 36″ Walk-In
  • Insulation Ready
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-ENCLOSED-METAL-GBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 enclosed metal garage.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. 12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Enclosed Metal Garage layout.

12×20 delivers 240 sq ft of everyday enclosed metal garage space. A 12×20 metal garage gives you a lockable, weatherproof bay for a daily-driver sedan, a project car, or a motorcycle collection. Roll-up door on the gable end, walk-in door on the side, and you’ve got a workshop you can heat in winter. Popular with hobbyists who’d outgrown a 12×20 shed.

💡 Pro tip:Enclosed Metal Garage works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Enclosed Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Enclosed Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Enclosed Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday enclosed metal garage
Everyday enclosed metal garage
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a enclosed metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWenclosed metal garage + seasonal storage
enclosed metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 enclosed metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Enclosed Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Enclosed Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Enclosed Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Enclosed Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage cost?

A 12×20 enclosed metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 enclosed metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud enclosed metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 enclosed metal garage?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud enclosed metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 enclosed metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 enclosed metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 enclosed metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 enclosed metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 enclosed metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 enclosed metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 enclosed metal garage typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Enclosed Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel garage with open white roll-up door beside a mountain lake

12×20 Enclosed Metal Garage

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed gym with open door, brown trim, and transom windows beside a wood deck

12×20 Metal Storage Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Metal Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Metal Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Metal Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Metal Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. The 12×20 metal shed swallows lawn tractors, snow blowers, push mowers, ladders, and the.

You’re viewing:Metal Storage Shed·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×7 Roll-Up
  • Walk-In Door
  • 20-Yr Warranty
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-METAL-STORAGE-SHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 metal storage shed.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft shop

Metal Storage Shed layout.

Looking for a 12×20 metal storage shed? At 240 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. The 12×20 metal shed swallows lawn tractors, snow blowers, push mowers, ladders, and the seasonal yard chemicals most homeowners would rather not store in the basement. Add a roll-up door for tractor access plus a walk-in for daily entry. Beats a wood shed on lifespan by decades.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Storage Shed works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Metal Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday metal storage shed
Everyday metal storage shed
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal storage shed + seasonal storage
metal storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Metal Storage Shed, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 metal storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Metal Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Metal Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Backyard Workshop

12×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 metal storage shed cost?

A 12×20 metal storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 metal storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 metal storage shed?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 metal storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 metal storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 metal storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 metal storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 metal storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 metal storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 metal storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 metal storage shed typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Tan metal shed gym with open door, brown trim, and transom windows beside a wood deck

12×20 Metal Storage Shed

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

12×20 Backyard Workshop

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $3,550

12

12×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,050$3,550SAVE $500
or $74/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size12×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$3,550$4,050Save $500
or as low as $74/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×20
12×20
this size
$3,550
14×20
wider
$4,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 240 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,395
  • Wired Ready
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×20 backyard workshop.

12 feet wide × 20 feet long. A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 20′ · 240 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

A 240 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along the back wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or tinkering year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 12×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
240 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width12′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space240 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
240 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

240sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$74/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $74/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×20?

240 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 20′ footprint with 240 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $1,920–$2,880 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,080+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 12×20

Single-Vehicle Carport

12×20 single-vehicle carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Vehicle Carport →

🏡 12×20

Enclosed Metal Garage

12×20 enclosed metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Enclosed Metal Garage →

🏡 12×20

Metal Storage Shed

12×20 metal storage shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Storage Shed →

🎯 12×20

Motorcycle & ATV Storage

12×20 motorcycle & atv storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Storage →

🌾 12×20

Equipment & Hay Shed

12×20 equipment & hay shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment & Hay Shed →

🏡 12×20

Pool House / Cabana

12×20 pool house / cabana configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pool House / Cabana →

🏡 12×20

Home Office / Studio

12×20 home office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Office / Studio →

🌾 12×20

Garden & Greenhouse Annex

12×20 garden & greenhouse annex configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,200Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Garden & Greenhouse Annex →

🏢 12×20

Mobile Office / Job Site

12×20 mobile office / job site configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Mobile Office / Job Site →

🎯 12×20

Hobby Room / She Shed

12×20 hobby room / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Room / She Shed →

🏡 12×20

RV & Boat Cover (Compact)

12×20 rv & boat cover (compact) configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$3,550Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV & Boat Cover (Compact) →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 12×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 12×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $3,550 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $74/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 240+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $74/month on a 12×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 12×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×20 backyard workshop typically adds $1,920–$2,880 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with green wainscoting, green roll-up door and white entry

12×20 Backyard Workshop

240 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×20 steel building delivers 240 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$3,550.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart